Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2011
2011 Dakota
11ND33-126-AB Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Dakota
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and
the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................175
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................245
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 333
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................353
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................405
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 421
10
INDEX
...................................................................431
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Locking Doors With A Key .............. 15
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 15
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ...... 15
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 15
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ............................. 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped ............... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ To Arm The System ................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry ...................... 20
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . 20
2
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 21
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 23
▫ General Information ................... 23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 24
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 24
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 25
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 25
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 28
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 28
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 28
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock .............. 32
䡵 Windows ............................ 33
▫ Power Windows ...................... 33
▫ Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only ......... 34
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 34
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 35
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 35
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 39
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 44
▫ Center Lap Belts ...................... 45
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 46
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 46
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped ......................... 47
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ................. 48
▫ Energy Management Feature ............. 48
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 49
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 50
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 51
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Air
Bags .............................. 51
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features .......... 53
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 55
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 62
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 63
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 75
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 76
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 76
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 77
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 78
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 80
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ignition Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become temporarily
trapped in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key:
1. Press and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ignition Release Button
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with
either side up. To lock the driver’s door, turn the key
rearward. To unlock the driver’s door, turn the key
forward. For external door lock lubrication, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel one-
half revolution, turn off the engine and remove the key.
Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until
the lock engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON/RUN
position, and the brake pedal is pressed.
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威 prevents unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion by disabling the engine. The system does not need to
be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following steps:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the
first key.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE:
If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized
dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated it will provide both
audible and visible signals. The horn will sound repeat-
edly for the three minutes and the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is
arming. After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
ously during vehicle operation, have the Vehicle Security
Alarm checked by an authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle
Sentry Key威 in inserted into the ignition and turned to
ON/RUN. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE trans-
mitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a
programmed Sentry Key威.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, the alarm will sound when you pull the door
handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the
vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to unlock the
door(s). The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed with
the RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a
programmed Sentry Key威 into the ignition and turning
the key to the ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position or a RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors. When the unlock button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first unlock button press by using the following
procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec-
onds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold
the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors
are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the
horn will chirp once.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly
plant activated. If desired, this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec-
onds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold
the PANIC button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle
by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lamps With Lock Programming
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button for at least
4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside
of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using The Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans-
mitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the
interior lights will illuminate, the headlights and parking
lights will flash, and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the RKE transmitter a second time. Panic mode
will automatically cancel after three minutes, or if the
vehicle is started and or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
During the Panic Mode, the door locks and RKE systems
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm System, on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test the RKE transmitter
operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
•
The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by
pushing down the door lock knob, located on the door trim
panel. Both front doors may be opened from the inside
with the door lock knob in the down or locked position.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Manual Door Lock Knob
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key,
or closing the door, will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
the driver’s door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Automatic Door Locks Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times
ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
•
If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
•
Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
with local laws.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of PARK and the doors
closed).
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
The Customer Programming sequence to disable or en-
able Auto Unlock:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position and back to LOCK
position, a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK
position. (Do not start the engine.)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever up
to engage the locks, and down to disengage the child-
protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle, even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child Lock Control
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger-tip control of all the power windows.
There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for ten minutes
after the ignition is turned OFF unless the driver’s door is
opened.
Power Window Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only
The driver’s window switch has an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The Window Lockout Switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button a second time.
Power Window Lockout Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows
are open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window — if equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•
In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions, have combination lap/shoulder
belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in an accident
the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) to
secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). For additional
information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
in this section. The following chart defines the seating
positions with this feature.
Left Center Right
First Row CRS Lock
Second Row CRS Lock CRS Lock
—If
Equipped
CRS Lock
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR the proper fastening procedure is as follows:
1. For Child Restraint System (CRS): Pull the seat belt all
the way out, then latch the buckle and allow the excess
webbing to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode. This will secure the child
restraint tightly and properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2. For regular occupants: Only pull the belt webbing out
far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. If the belt is pulled fully out, allow the belt
to fully retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. Then, carefully pull out only the amount
of webbing necessary to latch the buckle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Press the release
button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or
down to the position that fits you best.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
(Extended Cab)
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in the desired position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Center Lap Belts
The front center seating position has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a cinching latch plate which are used to
secure a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section.
The following chart defines the type of feature for each
seating position.
Left Center Right
First Row Cinch – if
equipped
Cinch
Second Row Cinch Cinch – if
equipped
Cinch
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an
accident. These devices may improve the performance of
the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver to
fasten their seat belt. This feature is active whenever the
ignition is on. If the driver is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver seat belt is fastened. BeltAlert威 triggers within
60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The
reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until the driver
seat belt is fastened. After the sequence completes, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the
driver seat belt is fastened. The driver should instruct all
other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If the driver seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will chime as a single
notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light,
then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating
the BeltAlert威.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer, or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the
ON/RUN or START position.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON/RUN or START, buckle the driver’s
seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
(engine does not need to be running). Wait for the Seat
Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
4.
Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to signify
that you have successfully completed the programming.
NOTE: Watch the Seat Belt reminder Light to turn on
while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re-buckling
the seat belt.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is an accident.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use
the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the
air bags may no longer be functional. The protec-
tive covers for the air bag cushions are designed to
open only when the air bags are inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, rollover, or
side collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, front and side impact sensors
can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to certain impact events.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children
12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in
a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Infants And Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren”.)
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who
are older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren”.)
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have
an air bag off switch. A rearward-facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger air bag, which may cause
severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The Extended Cab first, and Crew Cab second row
outside seating positions, have cinching latch plates.
These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight, if necessary.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) — If Equipped
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-
compatible child restraint systems are now available.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be intro-
duced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Extended Cab
•
The Extended Cab right rear (if equipped with a rear
seat) passenger seating position has lower anchorages
for LATCH-equipped child restraints.
Crew Cab
•
The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower
attachments at all three seating positions. Child seats
with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the
outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type
of lower attachment, never install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible
child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you
can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt
for the outboard position, but you must use the vehi-
cle’s seat belt at the center position.
If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible,
you can only install the child restraints using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System”.
LATCH Anchors
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System — if equipped
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages at each
LATCH seating position (Refer to “Child Restraint Tether
Anchor”.) Many, but not all, restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side, with each
having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower
anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints, and some rear-
facing infant restraints, will also be equipped with a
tether strap, a hook for attachment to the tether strap
anchorage, and a means of adjusting the tension of the
strap.
LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top
of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover
material. Then, attach the tether strap to the anchorage
located on the back of the seat, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head re-
straint and route the tether strap under the head restraint
and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all three
straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Seat
Belts In Passenger Seating Positions” section. The chart
below defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row CRS Lock
Second Row CRS Lock CRS Lock
—If
Equipped
CRS Lock
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the
latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and
insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still
can’t make the child restraint secure, try a different
seating position.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
The Extended Cab model has one routing strap
located at the bottom of the rear outboard
seating position. The tether anchor itself is
located in the center of vehicle, in between the
two seating positions. When there is a rear seat delete
option, the tether anchorage located on the cab back
panel is designed to be used for the front seat center
seating position. The Crew Cab model has three anchor-
ages located behind each of the rear seating positions
(rear left, rear center, and rear right).
WARNING!
•
With a child restraint installed in the rear passen-
ger side locations, use care when adjusting the
front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seatback
coming in contact with the belted child directly
behind the seat. The child could be injured.
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure the child restraint tether strap is
always routed through the proper anchor strap
inner loop.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat
(Extended Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
positions.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor
strap is pulled tight.
Tether Strap Routing Loop
Tether Strap Routing
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Crew Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material
loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
Multiple Child Restraints
1 — Inner Anchor Strap Rings 4 — Passenger Side Rear Child
Seat
2 — Snap Hook 5 — Center Rear Child Seat
3 — Tether Strap 6 — Drivers Side Rear Child
Seat
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child restraint to secure
a child restraint top tether strap. See your authorized
dealer for help, if necessary.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
an accident. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 85
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 85
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 86
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 87
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 87
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 87
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 88
▫ Operation .......................... 90
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 98
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 101
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 105
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 107
▫ General Information .................. 118
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 118
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 118
▫ Commands ........................ 119
▫ Voice Training ...................... 123
3
䡵 Seats .............................. 123
▫ Power Driver Seat .................... 124
▫ Manual Seat Adjustment ............... 126
▫ Front Seat — Manual Recliner ........... 128
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped .......... 128
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 129
▫ Head Restraints ..................... 130
▫ Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat ....... 132
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 132
䡵 Lights ............................. 134
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights And
Panel Lights ........................ 134
▫ Headlight Delay ..................... 135
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 135
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 135
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 135
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 135
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 136
▫ Battery Saver ....................... 138
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped ............. 139
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 139
▫ Windshield Wipers ................... 140
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 141
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ................... 142
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 143
▫ To Activate ......................... 144
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Set A Desired Speed ................ 144
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 144
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 144
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 145
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 145
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 146
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 147
䡵 Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . 147
▫ US/M Button ....................... 148
▫ Reset Button ........................ 148
▫ Step Button ........................ 149
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ....... 149
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) .............. 149
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ................. 150
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) ................... 150
▫ C/T Button ........................ 150
▫ Global Reset ........................ 151
▫ Compass/Temperature Display .......... 151
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration .......... 152
▫ Manual Compass Calibration ............ 152
▫ To Put Into A Calibration Mode .......... 152
▫ Outside Temperature .................. 153
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 153
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 155
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 157
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 158
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button ................... 158
▫ Security ........................... 158
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 159
▫ General Information .................. 159
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 160
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 162
䡵 Rear Crate ’N Go威 Storage — If Equipped .... 163
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ............ 165
䡵 Console Features — If Equipped ........... 165
▫ Floor Console Features ................ 165
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 167
▫ Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails —
If Equipped ........................ 167
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 169
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ..... 169
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ...... 170
䡵 Slide-In Campers ...................... 170
▫ Camper Applications .................. 170
▫ General Information .................. 170
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles
Equipped With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . 171
䡵 Tailgate ............................ 171
▫ Tailgate Removal .................... 171
▫ Two-Position Tailgate/Upper
Load Platform ...................... 172
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding outside mirrors are hinged, and may be moved
either forward or rearward, to resist damage.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
Mirror Directions
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other with-
out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to
seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone
button and Voice
Command
button) that will enable you
to access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the
button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. Iamonmyway
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Power Driver Seat
On some models the driver’s seat can be equipped with
six-way power. The power seat controls are located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. Three
switches control the seat movement.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the four-way switch seat switch forward or rear-
ward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when you have reached the desired
position.
Power Seat Switches
Four-Way Seat Switch
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the four-way seat switch,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear seat switches (located on either side of the
four-way switch), the front or rear of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Tilt Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Manual Seat Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Front Seat — Manual Recliner
To recline the seatback, lift the recline lever, located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the
lever when you reach the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
Some vehicle may be equipped with a manual lumbar
support. The manual lumbar rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar
support.
Recline Lever
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
Lumbar Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re-
straints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things T o
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.
Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear
seat cushion.
The Crew Cab Rear Seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full
back. Either cushion can be raised, independently.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. First pull the hood release lever located under the left
side of the instrument panel.
2. Then push the safety latch lever up while lifting the
grille with your hand. It is located at the bottom center of
the grille.
Hood Release Lever Location
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift the hood, and the gas filled props will hold it open.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Secondary Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel next to the steering wheel.
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
all turned on. The headlights will turn on when the
switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Headlight Switch Location
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for
60 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 60 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
turning the ignition ON.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started, the transmission is out of the PARK
position and the parking brake is released. This provides
a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until the ignition is
turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than normal
intensity. If the parking brake is applied or the transmis-
sion is in the PARK position, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn off.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the
headlight rotary control in the parking light or
headlight position and pushing on the headlight
rotary control. The fog lights will operate only when the
parking lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument
cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second
time, also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to
go out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day. If the dimmer control is not in this
position, the audio display may be difficult to read if the
headlights are on during the daytime.
NOTE: Club Cab威/Quad Cab威 models may have an
optional switched dome lamp that is operated by press-
ing the lens.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Dimmer Control
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
If a turn signal has been left on for a minimum of
1 mile (1.6 km), a continuous chime will sound.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
Signaling Turns
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
High/Low Beam Switch
Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
High/Low Beam
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on cargo
button. The cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UN-
LOCK button is pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry
feature.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Cargo Light Switch
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every two seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
Wiper/Washer Operation
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than one second
while in the off position, the wiper will wipe approxi-
mately three wipes after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that exceeds
the temperature range of your climate. This rating infor-
mation can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Push the lever away from the steering wheel to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are
located on the steering wheel. When engaged, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation
at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — Resume 4 — Set
2 — Cancel 5 — On/Off
3 — Decel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates to
indicate that the system is on.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press and release the SET
button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF but-
ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases
the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON, the
speed can be increased by pressing and holding the
RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button is released, a
new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the
button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph
(4.8 km/h).
Tapping the DECEL button once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 ft
(610 m), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially
when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed.
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h), the
Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW/HAUL button lo-
cated at the end of the shift lever.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Overhead Console
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after approximately 10 minutes.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
US/M Button
Use the US/M button to change the display from U.S. to
metric measurement units.
RESET Button
Use the RESET button to reset the following displays:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Trip Odometer
•
Elapsed time.
US/M Button
RESET Button
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STEP Button
Use the STEP button to choose, or cycle through, the four
trip conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will
momentarily blank, the history will be erased, and the
AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS
BEFORE THE RESET. The reset value is based on a
minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled
from the previous drive cycle. The display may take
several miles/kilometers for this value to change, de-
pending upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
STEP Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE: The DTE is not resettable.
When Distance To Empty = LOW FUEL, the fuel gauge
pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this
point (fuel gauge pointer on the red “E” marker), there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi-
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero
until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
NOTE: The maximum value is approximately
6000 miles (9656 km).
Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to
change to zero. Then the trip odometer must be reset in
order to update the trip odometer miles.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to zero.
C/T Button
Use the C/T (Compass/Temperature) button to select a
readout of the outside temperature and one of eight
compass headings that indicate the direction in which the
vehicle is facing.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will display the last known outside tempera-
ture when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven
several minutes before the updated temperature is dis-
played. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed
temperature, therefore temperature readings are not up-
dated when the vehicle is not moving.
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds
while in any of the three resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three
displays.
Compass/Temperature Display
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32°
F (0° C), the road surface may be icy, particularly in
woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
C/T Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead Console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
To Put Into A Calibration Mode
Turn the ignition ON and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed, complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
according to the Compass Variance Map.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under
the hood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature; therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) or during stop-and-go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off of your vehi-
cle’s battery.
Compass Variance Map
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Alarm (if equipped) is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink Buttons
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) illuminates
the HomeLink威 symbol (a house with an arrow inside it)
along with 1, 2 or 3 indicators under it, when a
HomeLink威 button is pressed.
Pay attention to the indicator(s), as they will flash at
different rates, or remain solid during training.
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds. Release the buttons when the indicators start
to flash.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the
HomeLink威 display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the indicator(s) change from a slow to a rapid flash
rate.
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
If the signal is too weak to train, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the indicator(s) blink rapidly for two seconds and then
remains constant, continue with the next section: “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System”.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink,” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor(s) will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash
when trained.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under, “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the indicator(s) starts to flash. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威, Step #2, and follow all remaining
steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash. Note that
all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com, for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories designed
for use with standard power outlet adapters. One power
outlet is located in the instrument panel (below the
temperature control setting knob) and one is located
inside the full-size center console.
When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used,
it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically
when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do
not hold the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.
Instrument Panel Outlet
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #22 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console
2 — #28 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in, draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Use these only inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cupholders located on the console.
A two-cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabs,
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
Front Cup Holders — Crew Cab
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR CRATE ’N GO姞 STORAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The rear Crate ’n Go威 storage, located under the rear seat
lower cushion, consists of two removable, collapsible
storage crates.
To open the crates, lift upward on the crate handles and
engage the crate end flaps.
Rear Cup Holders — Crew Cab
Open Crate
1 — Crate Handles
2 — Crate End Flaps
3 — Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
To remove the crate, press on the release lever, located on
the ends of the base, and lift up on the crate.
To install the crate into the base, insert the crate into the
inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the
crate, then snap into place.
To collapse the crate, push the crate end flaps inward to
disengage. Push the sides inward and snap into place.
WARNING!
Do not sit or stand on this crate. It may collapse
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Do not lift up on the “End Flaps” to open the crate,
damage to the “End Flaps” may occur.
NOTE: The maximum loading capacity for the small
crate is 30 lbs (13.6 kg) and 50 lbs (22.6 kg) for the large
crate.
Insert Crate
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
Retainer hooks, which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles, are built into the back panel of the cab.
CONSOLE FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Floor Console Features
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments.
•
Three cupholders (two removable).
•
iPod/Phone storage bin.
•
12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment.
•
Side open armrest lid.
•
Tissue holder and two pen holders.
Grocery Bag Retainers
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
•
Coin slots (located under the instrument panel center
stack).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Storage Compartments
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cuphold-
ers are both removable and dishwasher safe (upper rack
of dishwasher only) for cleaning purposes. Various stor-
age compartments provide versatile and useful storage.
A coin holder is also provided inside the driver side
storage bin.
Floor Console
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet And Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet and an
iPod/phone storage bin. The phone storage bin can be
used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the
power outlet inside the console compartment can be used
to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin. The
power outlet may be used for any portable item with a
standard 12 Volt power plug.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
until the armrest lid is closed manually, by pressing the
lid back into place. Two pen holders are provided on the
inside of the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided
on the inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket-size
soft pack of tissue.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails — If Equipped
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
320 lbs (145 kg) and the angle of the load on each
cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist
in securing cargo. Each cleat must be located and tight-
ened down in one of the detent’s, along either rail, in
order to keep cargo properly secure.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent’s
2 — Utility Rail Cleat
3 — Cleat Retainer Nut
Utility Rail End Cap
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located on the
right-side of the Air Conditioning and Heater
Control, below the A/C (snowflake) button. Press this
button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document, located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
available from your authorized dealer. For safety reasons,
follow all instructions on this important document.
General Information
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than Chrysler Group LLC. For war-
ranty coverage and service on these items, contact the
applicable manufacturer.
Sliding Rear Window Latch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the
support cables from the retainer pins. Raise the right side
of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the
hanger bracket. Then slide the tailgate to the right to
remove.
Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap Or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
TAILGATE
Tailgate Removal
To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45 degree angle.
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into
the passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Two-Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform
Your tailgate can be opened to the full-open or the
partial-open position. The partial-open position is for
loading objects longer than the length of the bed (sheets
of plywood, etc.) by creating an upper load platform:
Installing Lumber
1. Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro-
vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers, to form the floor. There are indents in the sheet
metal (or bed liner if equipped) on the inner side of the
box in front (Club Cab威 only) and behind both wheel
housings.
2. Secure the tailgate in the partially-open position:
3. Open the tailgate slightly.
1 — Bulkhead Divider Slot
2 — Wheel Housing Indentions
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable
guide and the tailgate bumper. Do this on both sides of
the tailgate.
To return the tailgate to the full-open position:
1. Lift up on the tailgate.
2. Remove both cables from between the cable guides
and the tailgate bumpers, and lower the tailgate.
CAUTION!
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in
vehicle damage.
•
Ensure the load is securely tied down and is
properly identified according to local laws if it
extends beyond the tail lights.
•
Loading should not exceed 400 lbs (181 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse and
partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may
result.
Tailgate Guide
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 177
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 178
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 179
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 192
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 192
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 200
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 202
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 205
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 205
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .......... 207
䡵 Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 211
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 211
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 214
4
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 216
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 219
䡵 Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC)................... 220
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 220
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 226
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 228
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 230
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 230
▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .......... 231
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio
Controls — If Equipped.................. 236
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 236
▫ CD Player ......................... 237
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 237
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 238
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 238
▫ Air Conditioning And Heater ............ 238
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 241
▫ Operation Tips Chart ................. 244
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Glove Compartment 11 — Transfer Case Switch*
2 — Air Outlets 7 — Radio 12 — Speed Control Switches
3 — Demister Outlets 8 — Climate Controls 13 — Hood Release
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Airbags 10 — Heated Seat Switches* * If Equipped
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or
when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature gauge if the engine overheats.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate
the direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on, with the vehicle speed
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the
fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less. There is a
pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the
side that your fuel filler door is located.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
5. High Beam Indicator
The high beam indicator will illuminate if the
headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H (Hot), this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H (Hot), the indicator will continu-
ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Fol-
low the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
10. Vehicle Security Light
The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security alarm is arming. The light will flash at
a slower speed continuously after the alarm is
set. The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN.
11. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when
the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a
bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon
as possible. Immediate service should be obtained.
13. Tachometer
The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions-per-
minute (RPM x 1000).
14. Shift Lever Indicator
The electronic shift lever indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. The display will place
a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21).
If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no
boxes), have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
15. Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the trip odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the trip odometer then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately two seconds).
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
door .............................Door Ajar
gASCAP ....................... Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
On vehicles equipped with a Overhead Console with
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer, some ve-
hicle messages may display in the Overhead Console
with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer when
the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to Overhead Con-
sole with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni-
tion Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and fuse
locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The fog light indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are on.
18. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature, that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) – If Equipped
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) light
informs you of a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) that
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
RUN and remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is
started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing,
the light will come on when the ignition is first turned to
ON/RUN and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for
5 seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If
the bulb does not come on during starting, have the
condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
24. 4WD Indicator
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine simultane-
ously.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is
turned to the ON/RUN position and will stay on for two
seconds. If the light stays on or illuminates during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
26. Cruise Indicator
The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic
speed control system is turned on.
27. Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamp indicator will illuminate
when the Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing
the CARGO button, located on the headlight
switch.
28. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
29. 4WD LOW Indicator
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
30. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer
display. Holding the button in, resets the trip odometer
reading.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 230 (REQ)
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command in the Uconnect™
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
Air Conditioning and Heater
Air Conditioning and Heater Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the
Air Conditioning and Heater Control
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
right of the control panel. Conditioned air will be di-
rected through the outlets selected by the mode control.
A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that
the air conditioning is on. Press the button a second time
to turn the air conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The Mode Control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains dust, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
either through the panel outlets or
both the panel and floor outlets to-
gether, depending on which recirculation mode is
selected.
Panel (Fresh Air Modes)
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Mode Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
•
The air conditioner compressor operates in both Mix
and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the A/C
button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the air
to help dry the windshield.
•
For information on operating the rear defrost, refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle”.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the Blower Control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix, Defrost, or Bi-Level modes are
in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, open the windows and turn the
blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position, turn
the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the
SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning, and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
drive with the windows open for the first few minutes.
Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows
and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel
Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi-level position. When a
comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode
position and adjust the temperature control knob and
blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high
humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the
Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the SNOW-
FLAKE button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
control, air direction and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
rate of window fogging.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer, to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50%
concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is
recommended. Refer to “Cooling System” under “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa-
tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode.
Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode pro-
vides the maximum performance from your air condi-
tioning. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be neces-
sary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator
slightly for fast idle operation.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions. This will help prevent snow going into the ducts.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Operation Tips Chart
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 249
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 249
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 249
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) ................ 250
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 250
▫ After Starting ....................... 251
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 251
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 252
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 253
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 253
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 253
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 253
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 258
▫ Transfer Case Operating Information/
Precautions ......................... 258
▫ Shifting Procedure ................... 262
5
䡵 Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential — If
Equipped ............................ 264
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 264
▫ Acceleration ........................ 264
▫ Traction ........................... 265
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 265
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 266
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 266
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips .................. 268
▫ After Driving Off-Road ................ 268
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 269
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 270
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 271
䡵 Brake System ........................ 273
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 273
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 275
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 275
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 278
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 279
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 280
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 284
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 284
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 285
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 286
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 287
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 287
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 288
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 289
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 289
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 290
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 290
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 291
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 292
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 293
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 295
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 295
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 296
▫ Base System ........................ 299
▫ General Information .................. 301
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 301
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 302
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 302
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 303
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 303
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 304
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 304
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 305
䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 306
▫ E-85 General Information ............... 306
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 307
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
▫ Fuel Requirements ................... 307
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 308
▫ Starting ........................... 308
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 309
▫ Replacement Parts ................... 309
▫ Maintenance ........................ 309
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 310
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 310
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 311
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 312
▫ Certification Label ................... 312
▫ Curb Weight ........................ 313
▫ Loading ........................... 313
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 314
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 315
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 319
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 320
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 320
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 321
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 326
䡵 Snowplow .......................... 327
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 328
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .............. 328
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .............. 328
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait
5 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel, in case the engine is flooded.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec-
ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be
repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Automatic Transmission
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates
the transmission gear selected. The shift lever is mounted
on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move
the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired
drive position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE, SECOND, FIRST or PARK, or
when shifting out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the transmission into PARK, remove
the key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
DRIVE
This range is for most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
This range is for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on
mountain roads where more precise speed control is
desirable, use second gear. Use it also when climbing
long grades, and for engine braking when descending
moderately steep grades. To prevent excessive engine
speed, do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
1 (First)
This range is for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds, 25 mph (40 km/h) or less,
when going down hill, use first gear. To prevent excessive
engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this
range.
Overdrive Operation
The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an
electronically-controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped)
gear (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically
shift from Drive to Overdrive, if the following conditions
are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h);
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating
temperature.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures,
the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will
automatically select the most desirable gear for opera-
tion at this temperature. Normal operation will re-
sume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section.
•
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desir-
able gear for operation at this temperature. If the
transmission temperature becomes hot enough, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illu-
minate and the transmission may downshift out of
Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cool down, the transmission will resume normal
operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, top gear is disabled and
some shift patterns are modified. On vehicles with five-
speed transmissions, shifts into Overdrive (fourth gear)
are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel
economy), and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to
third gear (for improved braking) will occur during
steady braking.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch, within the
torque converter, engages automatically at a calibrated
speed at light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under
heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated
speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically
and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in
Overdrive and in Drive.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usu-
ally after 1-3 miles [1.6 - 4.8 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Pressing the TOW/HAUL switch, when the
TOW/HAUL Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
that the transmission is able to shift into, and out of
Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Transfer Case Operating Information/Precautions
The electronic-shift transfer case is operated by the
transfer case switch, which is located on the instrument
panel.
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
•
Neutral (N)
Transfer Case Switch
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-
wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and high-
way conditions on dry hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by turning the transfer case switch to the
desired position - Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for
further information. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions are designed for loose or slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi-
tions on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower
left-hand corner of the transfer case switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located on the instrument cluster. If there is
no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case is in
two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light is on, the
desired position (4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW) has been
obtained.
If one or more shift requirements are not met:
1. An indicator light will flash.
2. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the transfer case switch back to the current position, wait
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for further
information.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor-
mation:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High — This range is used for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock — This range locks the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low — This range provides low speed
four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and is used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Shifting Procedure
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON, and the newly-selected position indica-
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD-to-4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK-to-2WD
Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped, or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the transfer case switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if
the key is in the ACC position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
Systems, the four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to
complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.
4WD LOCK-to-4WD LOW or 4WD LOW-to-4WD
LOCK
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), or completely stopped. USE
EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, turn the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of the Preferred or Alternate Procedure
are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, or if they
no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in
process, then the indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To
retry the selection, turn the transfer case switch back to
the current position, wait five seconds, and retry shift.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON, then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL — IF
EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the wheel having the better traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE: The “Brake Warning Light” only shows that the
parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position of the transmission
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to
guard against vehicle movement and possible in-
jury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
“Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light”
during brake use.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber “ABS Warning Light.” When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and
Wheel – If Equipped
The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and
function as the original equipment tire and wheel found
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your
vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original
equipment tire and wheel, refer to the recommended tire
rotation pattern in “Tire Rotation Recommendations” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use.
Do not install more than one non-matching temporary
use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. Do
not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on
the vehicle at any given time
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
•
The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles
equipped with P245/70R16 tires.
•
Use only “Class S” chains or other traction aids
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
•
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
•
Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
vehicle.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R16 tires.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P245/70R16. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
•
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your
vehicle. There may not be adequate clearance for
the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo-
cated on the driver’s side B-pillar).
Tire Rotation
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold
for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
Lamp.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “TPMS
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Lamp” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPMS
Lamp” will turn off only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the tire pressure moni-
toring sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur by any
of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due to electronic
devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors; 2) Installing some form of
aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave sig-
nals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings; 4) Using tire chains on the vehicle; 5) Using
wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound
and the “TPM Telltale Light” will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................ 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations, and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide, have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC), which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-
line.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems and may damage critical fuel system compo-
nents.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E-85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look
for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United
States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully
loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock per-
sists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.
(Continued)
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
E-85 Badge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer re-
quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door. When
fueling, the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler
door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicle while removing the cap or filling the tank.
(Continued)
Gas Cap Holder
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on
a truck bed. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
If fuel is poured from a portable container, the con-
tainer should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
Certification Label
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control and result in a collision. Also, overload-
ing can shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer is the tongue weight. In most
cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of
the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
may reduce handling, stability, and braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or altera-
tions to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information in-
cluding maximum trailer and tongue weight rating for
your vehicle, refer to the following website addresses:
•
http:// www.ramtrucks.com
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada)
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive ve-
hicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEU-
TRAL. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
tire inflation procedures, refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. For the proper inspection
procedure, refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-
mation. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations:
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Tow/Haul – If Equipped
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the TOW/HAUL feature ON when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can resume cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOWPLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system in a collision and you could be injured.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing of two-wheel drive models is not
allowable. Towing the vehicle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Re-
moval of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended,
since this would allow fluid to drain from the
transmission.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
•
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
•
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL button is
located on the lower left hand corner of the trans-
fer case switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL can take place with the transfer case
switch in any mode position.
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
position for recreational towing.
•
Failure to follow these procedures can cause se-
vere transmission and/or transfer case damage.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not
start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press the transfer case NEUTRAL button for four sec-
onds.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Shut the engine OFF, and place the ignition key into
the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
NEUTRAL Button
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no
longer met during the four second timer, then the
NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Returning to Normal Operation
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
2. The vehicle must be at a complete stop.
3. Place the ignition key in the OFF position (if it has
been moved or the engine has been started).
4. Place the ignition key into the ON position (engine
off).
5. Press the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for one
second.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
8. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
9. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift into the position identified by the
transfer case switch.
10. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into DRIVE to
verify that the transfer case has engaged.
11. Set the parking brake. Shift the transmission into
PARK.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until one second elapses and the
shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the one second time, then all of the mode
position indicator lights will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 334
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 335
▫ Jack Location ....................... 335
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ............... 337
▫ Preparations ........................ 340
▫ Instructions ........................ 341
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare .............. 345
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 345
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 346
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 347
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 349
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 351
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 352
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 352
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 352
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the top
of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
In this vehicle, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment
under the rear passenger seat. Crew Cab model scissor
jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the
rear passenger seat.
The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
until the jack is secured into place.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
A finger-operated helper tool is provided to assist re-
moval and stowage of the jack. This tool must be
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.
Jack Stowage Location (Extended Cab)
Jack Screw
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
icy or slippery areas.
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
Jack Stowage Location (Crew Cab)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
Steps for Removing the Spare Tire
•
Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
the supplied finger-assist tool.
•
Remove the finger-assist tool from jack and set aside
until jack is stowed.
•
Assemble the jack tools.
•
Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
•
Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
•
Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
from under the vehicle.
•
Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension Spare Tire Stowage Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission).
On 4-Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the
4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from stowage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior
to inboard transition, as shown. Operate the jack using
the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube
extension, may be used but is not required.
4. When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the
positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
5. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
Left Rear Jacking Location Right Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. The correct nut tightness is 120 to
160 ft lbs (163 to 217 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
•
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
three times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
NOTE: To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does
not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire
must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive Battery Post
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while apply-
ing slight pressure to the accelerator.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels
continuously for more than 30 seconds.
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
Tow Hooks
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles under
tow, must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
OFF position, along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h), and the distance must not exceed
15 miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph (50 km/h), it must be towed on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more
than 15 miles (25 km), can cause severe transmission
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 355
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.7L ............. 356
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 357
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 357
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 358
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 359
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 360
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 360
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 361
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 363
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 363
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 364
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 366
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 367
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 367
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 368
7
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 368
▫ Cooling System ..................... 371
▫ Brake System ....................... 376
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 378
▫ Transfer Case ....................... 381
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................. 381
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 382
䡵 Fuses .............................. 387
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
Center) ........................... 387
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 391
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 392
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 392
▫ Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn
Signal Lamps ....................... 392
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps,
And Turn Signal Bulbs ................ 394
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo
Lamp ............................. 397
▫ License Lamps ...................... 399
▫ Fog Lamps ......................... 401
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 401
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 402
▫ Engine ............................ 402
▫ Chassis ........................... 403
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed-up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart/liter of oil when the reading
is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading
at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected,
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), and is an ozone-saving prod-
uct. However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers
or other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser and
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in
an emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-
sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance, requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Level
The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level
of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing
the engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service at-
tendant of this. As long as the engine operating tempera-
ture is satisfactory, the coolant recovery bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant recovery bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine, which contains aluminum
components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc
brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick, use
the following procedure. If your vehicle has a capped
dipstick, it is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at
the normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
(10° C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully-seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid,
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid,
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
Front axle fluid level should be 3/4 in (20 mm) below the
bottom of the fill plug.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
Rear axle limited-slip differentials require the use of
MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive or equivalent. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information. This should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
made, when equipped with limited-slip differential. Rear
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
axle fluid level should be 1/8 in (3 mm) below bottom of
filler plug for 8-1/4 in, and 9-1/4 in axles.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up-paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal pol-
ishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recom-
mended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that
may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Use MOPAR威 Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery and trim.
Leather Seat Care And Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters, or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments, which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity num-
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and
relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 Spare
2 Spare
3 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
4 50 Amp
Red
Power Seat
5 Spare
6 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw,
Instrument Cluster,
Radio
7 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module/Fuel/
RAD/AC Coils
8 10 Amp
Red
Instrument Cluster/
Mirror/4x4
9 Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
10 2 Amp
Gray
Run/Start Ignition
Switch
11 10 Amp
Red
AC Clutch
12 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Lt Stop/
Turn
13 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Rt Stop/
Turn
14 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw #2
15 25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain Control
Module
16 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
17 20 Amp
Yellow
Antilock Brakes Feed
(Valves)
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
19 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Center Brake
Lamp
20 20 Amp
Yellow
Instrument Cluster/
Door Locks/Brake
Transmission Shift
Interlock
21 25 Amp
Natural
Audio Amp
22 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
(Switchable)
23 20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lamps
24 20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain Control
Module B+
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
25 15 Amp
Blue
Instrument Cluster
Illumination
26 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Run/Start
Feed
27 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
28 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
29 20 Amp
Yellow
Body Control Module
4 (Wipers)
30 Spare
31 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Run/AC/
Windows
32 30 Amp
Pink
Body Control Module
1 (Ext. Lights # 1)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
33 30 Amp
Pink
Automatic Shutdown
34 30 Amp
Pink
Body Control Module
2 (Ext. Light # 2)
35 40 Amp
Green
Climate Control Sys-
tem Blower Motor
36 Spare
37 Spare
38 20 Amp
Blue
Spare
39 30 Amp
Pink
Starter Solenoid
40 40 Amp
Green
Ignition Run Feeds
41 30 Amp
Pink
Wiper Motor
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
42 25 Amp
Natural
Body Control Module
5 (T-Case)
43 10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
44 10 Amp
Red
Rt Park Lamps
45 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Park
Lamps
46 10 Amp
Red
Airbag System # 2
47 Spare
48 20 Amp
Blue
Sunroof/Sound Box
49 30 Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow B+
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
50 40 Amp
Green
Antilock Brakes
Module (Pump)
51 40 Amp
Green
Park Lamps
52 Spare
53 40 Amp
Green
Rear Defogger
54 Spare
55 Spare
56 10 Amp
Red
Heated Seats
57 20 Amp
Yellow
Airbag System # 2
58 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seats
59 10 Amp Climate Control
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
Red System Module
60 10 Amp
Red
Antilock Brakes
Module
61 20 Amp
Yellow
Body Control Module
3 (Reverse Lamps)
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
•
Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) labeled Main Ignition Off Draw (IOD).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Dome Lamp ........................WL212–2
Cargo Lamp ............................921
Overhead Console Lamps................... 192
Reading Lamp ......................WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Headlamp .............................H13
Front Park/Turn/Side Marker ............3157NA
Back-Up .............................. 3157
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp ............. 921
Fog Lamp .............................9145
License Plate Lamp ....................... 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal.................3057
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Signal
Lamps
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlamp
housing.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the
headlamp housing from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlamp housing in your
hands, unlock and disconnect headlamp bulb connector.
5. Twist 1/4-turn and remove headlamp bulb from hous-
ing and replace.
NOTE: The headlamp bulb is a halogen bulb. Take care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from
your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which
reduces bulb life.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
To remove the park/turn signal bulb, rotate bulb socket
1/4-turn and remove socket from housing. Pull bulb
straight from socket.
Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps, And
Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body. 3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket. 5. Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing.
Place the two raised blocks past the body.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body, as shown.
2. Remove housing from the cab.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
3. Remove connector from housing tab for more clear-
ance.
4. Turn desired bulb socket 1/4-turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
6. Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
License Lamps
1. Using a screwdriver, pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
2. Rotate the socket 1/4-turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull bulb from socket.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Reverse this procedure for installation.
Fog Lamps
1. Disconnect connector from the fog lamp by raising the
wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness
connector.
2. Rotate the bulb 1/4-turn counterclockwise and pull to
remove from the fog lamp housing.
3. Reverse procedure to install.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
Cooling System (Includes 2.1 Quarts/2 Liters for
Coolant Bottle)
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [0.99 mm]) Lower Bank —
FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763) or
equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive (MS-10111) or equivalent. When-
ever a fluid change is made, 4 oz (118 ml) should be added to the gear
lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake
fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicat-
ing that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs. One set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(78 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(156 000 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the top row and side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 423
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 423
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 423
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 423
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 423
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 424
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 424
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 424
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 425
▫ Service Contract ..................... 425
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 426
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 426
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 426
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 426
▫ In Canada ......................... 427
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 427
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726–4636
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 373
Adding Fuel ........................... 310
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 363
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............366
Air Conditioning ........................ 238
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .............366,367
Air Conditioning System ................ 238,366
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......... 238,241
Air Filter .............................. 363
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 285
Airbag ...........................51,58,190
Airbag Deployment ....................... 59
Airbag Light ........................57,61,78
Airbag Maintenance .......................60
Airbag, Side ..........................55,58
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........54,55,58
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................18,181
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Alarm, Panic ............................ 23
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................ 208,232
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............273
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................. 181
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........18
Anti-Theft System ..................... 18,181
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 372,401
Disposal ...........................374
Appearance Care ........................382
Assistance Towing .......................102
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................31
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 86
Automatic Door Locks .....................29
Automatic Transaxle .................... 12,252
Interlock System ......................15
Automatic Transmission ............. 249,253,378
Adding Fluid .......................379
Fluid Level Check ....................379
Fluid Type ......................... 403
432 INDEX
Gear Ranges ........................253
Special Additives ..................... 378
Torque Converter ....................257
Axle Fluid .............................403
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ...............381
B-Pillar Location ........................280
Battery ............................... 364
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 24
Saving Feature (Protection) .............. 138
Belts, Seat ............................ 39,78
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............367
Brake Fluid ............................ 403
Brake System ........................273,376
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................273
Fluid Check ........................376
Master Cylinder .....................376
Parking ...........................271
Warning Light .................... 181,186
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 253
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........75
Bulb Replacement ....................... 392
Bulbs, Light ..........................80,392
Calibration, Compass .....................152
Camper ............................... 170
Capacities, Fluid ........................401
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ........................ 362
Power Steering ...................... 270
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............. 374
Car Washes ............................383
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............77,171,305
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................312
Cargo Light ............................139
Cellular Phone ........................ 88,238
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............397
Certification Label ....................... 312
10
INDEX 433
Changing A Flat Tire .....................335
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 276
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............... 358
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............76
Checks, Safety ........................... 76
Child Restraint ......................63,64,65
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............67,72
Child Seat ..............................69
Cleaning
Wheels ............................384
Climate Control .........................238
Clock ...........................194,212,221
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 237
Compact Spare Tire ......................288
Compass ...........................151,152
Compass Calibration .....................152
Compass Variance ....................... 152
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 147
Console, Floor ..........................165
Console, Overhead ....................... 146
Contract, Service ........................ 425
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 374
Cooling System ......................... 371
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............373
Coolant Capacity .....................401
Coolant Level ....................371,375
Disposal of Used Coolant ............... 374
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................372
Inspection .......................... 375
Points to Remember .................. 375
Pressure Cap ........................374
Radiator Cap .......................374
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .... 372,401,402
Temperature Gauge ................... 179
Crates
Rear Convenience Storage ..............163
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............143
434 INDEX
Cupholders ............................162
Customer Assistance .....................423
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 62
Daytime Running Lights ................... 135
Dealer Service ..........................360
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 169
Defroster, Windshield ...................78,240
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 140
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................357
Differential, Limited-Slip ..................264
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 180
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ................379
Oil (Engine) ........................ 361
Power Steering ...................... 270
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 374
Door Locks ............................. 28
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 29
Door Opener, Garage .....................153
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................265
E-85 Fuel .............................306
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................87
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 160
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 143
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck .............349
Jump Starting ....................... 345
Tow Hooks ......................... 351
Towing ............................352
Emission Control System Maintenance .........358
Engine
Air Cleaner .........................363
Block Heater ........................251
10
INDEX 435
Break-In Recommendations .............. 75
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................402
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 77,305
Flooded, Starting ..................... 250
Fuel Requirements ....................401
Jump Starting ....................... 345
Oil .........................361,401,402
Oil Filler Cap ....................... 362
Oil Selection ........................ 401
Oil Synthetic ........................ 363
Starting ........................... 249
Temperature Gauge ................... 179
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........59
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Ethanol ............................... 302
Event Data Recorder ...................... 62
Exhaust Gas Caution ................... 77,305
Exhaust System .......................77,368
Extender, Seat Belt ........................ 51
Exterior Lighting ........................134
Exterior Lights .......................... 80
Filters
Air Cleaner .........................363
Engine Oil ....................... 363,402
Engine Oil Disposal ................... 363
Flashers
Hazard Warning ..................... 334
Turn Signal ................. 80,137,179,394
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 345
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ......................309
Engine Oil ......................... 308
Fuel Requirements .................306,307
Maintenance ........................309
Replacement Parts ....................309
Starting ........................... 308
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 250
436 INDEX
Floor Console ..........................165
Fluid Capacities ......................... 401
Fluid Leaks .............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ................379
Brake ............................. 376
Engine Oil ......................... 361
Power Steering ...................... 270
Transfer Case .......................381
Fluid, Brake ...........................403
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 402
Fog Lights .......................... 135,401
Four Wheel Drive .......................258
Operation .......................... 258
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................334
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 349
Front Axle (Differential) ...................381
Fuel ................................. 301
Adding ........................... 310
Ethanol ........................... 302
Gauge ............................ 179
Methanol .......................... 302
Octane Rating ....................301,402
Requirements .................... 301,401
Tank Capacity .......................401
Fuel, Flexible ........................... 306
Fueling ...............................310
Fuses ................................387
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ........... 153
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............310,311,357
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ................... 179
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................301
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 302
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 179
Fuel ..............................179
Odometer ....................... 182,183
10
INDEX 437
Speedometer ........................ 181
Tachometer .........................182
Gear Ranges ...........................253
General Information ................... 118,301
Glass Cleaning .......................... 386
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................165
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............313,315
Gross Cargo Weight ......................312
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................ 315
GVWR ...............................312
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) .............. 88
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................265
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 334
Headlights ............................ 392
High Beam ......................... 138
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......138
Lights On Reminder ..................135
Passing ............................ 137
Switch ............................ 134
Heated Seats ...........................129
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 251
High Beam Indicator .....................180
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 138
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................319
Holder, Cup ........................... 162
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 153
Hood Release .......................... 132
Ignition
Key ...............................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint ........................63,64
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................85
438 INDEX
Instrument Cluster ....................... 179
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 177
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 386
Interior Appearance Care ..................385
Interior Lights ..........................135
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........140
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Operation .......................... 335
Jacking Instructions ...................... 341
Jump Starting .......................... 345
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................ 17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................51
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........137,179,394
Lane Change Assist ...................... 137
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................39
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ....... 67
Latches ................................80
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 80
Life of Tires ............................ 291
Light Bulbs .............................80
Lights .............................. 80,134
Airbag ...................... 57,61,78,190
Anti-Lock Warning ...................181
Back-Up ...........................394
Brake Warning ...................... 186
Bulb Replacement ....................392
Cargo ............................. 139
Center Mounted Stop .................. 397
Courtesy/Reading .................... 147
Cruise ............................ 191
10
INDEX 439
Daytime Running .................... 135
Exterior ............................ 80
Fog ......................... 135,185,401
Hazard Warning Flasher ............... 334
Headlights .........................134
High Beam ......................... 138
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............ 138
Instrument Cluster ................... 179
Intensity Control ..................... 136
Interior ......................... 135,147
License ............................ 399
Lights On Reminder ..................135
Low Fuel ..........................179
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......187
Passing ............................ 137
Seat Belt Reminder ................... 180
Service ............................392
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ......... 189
Turn Signal ................. 80,137,392,394
Voltage ............................181
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 179
Limited-Slip Differential ................... 264
Loading Vehicle ......................... 312
Tires..............................280
Locks .................................28
Auto Unlock ......................... 31
Automatic Door ...................... 29
Child Protection ...................... 32
Door ..............................28
Keys .............................. 12
Power Door ......................... 28
Steering Wheel ....................... 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH) .......................67
Lubrication, Body ....................... 367
Lug Nuts ............................. 344
Lumbar Support ........................128
440 INDEX
Maintenance Free Battery ..................364
Maintenance Procedures ...................360
Maintenance Schedule .................... 406
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 187,358
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection ...................403
Manual, Service .........................427
Map/Reading Lights ..................... 147
Methanol .............................302
Mirrors ................................85
Automatic Dimming ...................86
Electric Powered ...................... 87
Outside ............................87
Rearview ...........................85
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............296
Mopar Parts .........................359,426
MTBE/ETBE ...........................302
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 136
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................75
Occupant Restraints ................... 35,55,59
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............54,55,58
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 301
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ............ 268
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ............ 268
Oil Change Indicator .....................184
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................184
Oil, Engine .........................361,402
Capacity ........................... 401
Change Interval .....................361
Dipstick ...........................361
Disposal ...........................363
Filter ..........................363,402
Filter Disposal .......................363
Identification Logo ................... 362
Materials Added to ................... 363
Recommendation .................. 362,401
10
INDEX 441
Synthetic .......................... 363
Viscosity ........................362,401
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 357,358
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ...........153
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................87
Overdrive .......................... 182,255
Overdrive OFF Switch .................... 255
Overhead Console .................... 146,147
Overhead Travel Information Center .......... 147
Overheating, Engine ...................... 180
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,427
Panic Alarm ............................ 23
Parking Brake .......................... 271
Parking On Hill ......................... 271
Passing Light ........................... 137
Pets ..................................75
Pets, Transporting ........................ 75
Phone, Cellular ..........................88
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) ..............88
Pickup Box ............................172
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 280
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 387
Door Locks ........................20,28
Mirrors ............................87
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........ 160
Steering ........................269,270
Windows ...........................33
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 403
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 50
Preparation for Jacking .................... 340
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ........................... 48
Quad Cab ............................. 132
442 INDEX
Radial Ply Tires .........................287
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ....... 371,374
Radio Operation ........................ 238
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................381
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ...............167
Rear Convenience Storage Crates ............. 163
Rear Window .......................... 170
Rear Window Defroster ...................169
Rear Window Features .................... 169
Rearview Mirrors ........................85
Reclining Front Seats .....................128
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 62
Recreational Towing ...................... 328
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 329
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....331
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 302
Refrigerant ............................ 367
Release, Hood ..........................132
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 49
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........236
Remote Starting System .................... 25
Replacement Keys ........................ 17
Replacement Parts .......................359
Replacement Tires ....................... 292
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 426
Resetting Oil Change Indicator .............. 184
Restraints, Child .......................63,69
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 35
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................349
Rotation, Tires ..........................295
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................78
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............80
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................426
Safety Information, Tire ................... 275
Safety Tips ............................. 76
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................77
10
INDEX 443
Satellite Radio Antenna .................208,232
Schedule, Maintenance ....................406
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 386
Seat Belt Reminder .......................49
Seat Belts .......................... 35,39,78
And Pregnant Women .................. 50
Child Restraint ..................... 63,65
Extender ........................... 51
Front Seat ..........................39
Inspection ..........................78
Pretensioners ........................ 48
Reminder ..........................180
Untwisting Procedure .................. 46
Seats .................................123
Adjustment ......................... 126
Heated ............................129
Lumbar Support ..................... 128
Reclining ..........................128
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............18,181
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 372,402
Selection of Oil .........................362
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ................... 17
Service and Maintenance ..................360
Service Assistance .......................423
Service Contract ......................... 425
Service Manuals ........................ 427
Setting the Clock ..................194,212,221
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ................253
Transfer Case .......................258
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ..................... 329
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ..................... 331
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............44
Shoulder Belts ........................... 39
444 INDEX
Signals, Turn ................... 80,137,179,394
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 293
Snow Plow ............................ 327
Snow Tires ............................ 295
Spare Tire ....................... 288,289,337
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............143
Speedometer ...........................181
Starting ............................... 249
Engine Block Heater .................. 251
Engine Fails to Start ..................250
Remote ............................25
Steering
Column Controls ..................... 136
Power .......................... 269,270
Wheel Lock .........................15
Wheel, Tilt ......................... 142
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .............. 236
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ......................... 236
Storage ............................... 391
Storage Bin ............................ 163
Storage, Behind the Seat ................... 163
Storage, Vehicle .........................391
Storing Your Vehicle ......................391
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 349
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................363
System, Remote Starting .................... 25
Tachometer ............................182
Tailgate ............................... 171
Taillights .............................. 394
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......... 179
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 67
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 142
Tip Start .............................. 249
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........280
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............278
Tire Markings .......................... 275
10
INDEX 445
Tire Safety Information .................... 275
Tires ............................ 80,284,429
Aging (Life of Tires) ..................291
Air Pressure ........................284
Chains ............................ 293
Changing .......................... 335
Compact Spare ......................288
General Information ..................284
High Speed ......................... 286
Inflation Pressures .................... 285
Life of Tires ........................291
Load Capacity ....................280,281
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .........296
Pressure Warning Light ................ 189
Quality Grading .....................429
Radial ............................ 287
Replacement ........................ 292
Rotation ...........................295
Safety .......................... 275,284
Sizes .............................276
Snow Tires .........................295
Spare Tire .......................... 337
Spinning ...........................290
Tread Wear Indicators .................290
Wheel Nut Torque .................... 344
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............320
Torque Converter Clutch ..................257
Tow Hooks, Emergency ...................351
Towing ............................... 314
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............. 102
Disabled Vehicle .....................352
Guide .............................320
Recreational ........................ 328
Weight ............................ 320
Towing Assistance ....................... 102
Traction ..............................264
Trailer Towing .......................... 314
Cooling System Tips ..................327
446 INDEX
Hitches ............................319
Minimum Requirements ................321
Trailer and Tongue Weight ..............320
Wiring ............................ 324
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 320
Trailer Weight .......................... 320
Transaxle .............................252
Automatic .......................12,252
Manual ............................14
Operation .......................... 252
Transfer Case ........................... 381
Fluid ............................. 403
Transmission ........................ 253,378
Automatic .................... 249,253,378
Fluid ............................. 403
Maintenance ........................378
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) .......................... 153
Tread Wear Indicators ....................290
Trip Computer ..........................147
Trip Odometer ..........................183
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................191
Turn Signals ...................137,179,392,394
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 88
Underhood Fuses ........................387
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 429
Universal Transmitter ..................... 153
Unlock, Auto ........................... 31
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............46
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...............167
Variance, Compass ....................... 152
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................... 281,312
10
INDEX 447
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ......................... 391
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............118
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............179
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................426
Washers, Windshield .....................141
Washing Vehicle ......................... 383
Water
Driving Through ..................... 265
Weight Load Carrying .................... 312
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................384
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................384
Wheel Changing ........................ 335
Wheel Nut Torque .......................344
Wind Buffeting .......................... 35
Window Fogging ........................ 242
Windows .............................. 33
Power ............................. 33
Rear Sliding ........................169
Windshield Defroster ...................78,240
Windshield Washers ............. 139,140,141,368
Fluid .......................... 140,368
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 367
Windshield Wipers ....................139,140
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................367
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 140
Wrecker Towing .........................352
448 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Seventh Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Chrysler Group LLC
11ND33-126-AG
